منهجية طالب العلم المذاهب الفقهية الأربعة الدكتور امجد علي سعادة

مقدمات حول أهمية الفقه وفضله dfasdf فضل علم الفقه ومنزلته مقدمات حول أهمية الفقه وفضله «يَرْفَعِ اللَّهُ الَّذِينَ آمَنُوا مِنْكُمْ وَالَّذِينَ أُوتُوا الْعِلْمَ دَرَجَاتٍ»  [المجادلة: 11] «مَنْ يُرِدِ اللَّهُ بِهِ خَيْرًا يُفَقِّهْهُ فِي الدِّينِ» «اللَّهُمَّ فَقِّهْهُ فِي الدِّينِ وَعَلِّمْهُ التَّأْوِيلَ»» Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

مقدمات حول أهمية الفقه وفضله dfasdf مقدمات حول أهمية الفقه وفضله «وَمَا كَانَ الْمُؤْمِنُونَ لِيَنْفِرُوا كَافَّةً فَلَوْلَا نَفَرَ مِنْ كُلِّ فِرْقَةٍ مِنْهُمْ طَائِفَةٌ لِيَتَفَقَّهُوا فِي الدِّينِ وَلِيُنْذِرُوا قَوْمَهُمْ إِذَا رَجَعُوا إِلَيْهِمْ لَعَلَّهُمْ يَحْذَرُونَ» [التوبة:122] Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

مقدمات حول أهمية الفقه وفضله dfasdf مقدمات حول أهمية الفقه وفضله «وَمَا كَانَ الْمُؤْمِنُونَ لِيَنْفِرُوا كَافَّةً فَلَوْلَا نَفَرَ مِنْ كُلِّ فِرْقَةٍ مِنْهُمْ طَائِفَةٌ لِيَتَفَقَّهُوا فِي الدِّينِ وَلِيُنْذِرُوا قَوْمَهُمْ إِذَا رَجَعُوا إِلَيْهِمْ لَعَلَّهُمْ يَحْذَرُونَ» [التوبة:122] Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

مقدمات حول أهمية الفقه وفضله dfasdf الفقه مسؤولية «وَلَا تَقُولُوا لِمَا تَصِفُ أَلْسِنَتُكُمُ الْكَذِبَ هَٰذَا حَلَالٌ وَهَٰذَا حَرَامٌ لِتَفْتَرُوا عَلَى اللَّهِ الْكَذِبَ إِنَّ الَّذِينَ يَفْتَرُونَ عَلَى اللَّهِ الْكَذِبَ لَا يُفْلِحُونَ» سورة النحل 116 «اتَّخَذُوا أَحْبَارَهُمْ وَرُهْبَانَهُمْ أَرْبَابًا مِنْ دُونِ اللَّهِ وَالْمَسِيحَ ابْنَ مَرْيَمَ وَمَا أُمِرُوا إِلَّا لِيَعْبُدُوا إِلَٰهًا وَاحِدًا لَا إِلَٰهَ إِلَّا هُوَ سُبْحَانَهُ عَمَّا يُشْرِكُونَ» سورة التوبة 31 مقدمات حول أهمية الفقه وفضله Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

مقدمات حول أهمية الفقه وفضله dfasdf الفقه مسؤولية وعن أبي أمامة، أن رسول الله صلى الله عليه وآله وسلم قال: «خُذُوا الْعِلْمَ قَبْلَ أَنْ يَذْهَبَ». قالوا: كيف يذهب العلم يا نبي الله، وفينا كتاب الله؟ قال: فغضب النبي صلى الله عليه وآله وسلم ثم قال: «ثَكِلَتْكُمْ أُمَّهَاتُكُمْ، أَوَلَمْ تَكُنِ التَّوْرَاةُ وَالْإِنْجِيلُ فِي بَنِي إِسْرَائِيلَ، فَلَمْ يُغْنِيَا عَنْهُمْ شَيْئًا؟ إِنَّ ذَهَابَ الْعِلْمِ أَنْ يَذْهَبَ حَمَلَتُهُ» رواه الدارمي بسند صحيح. مقدمات حول أهمية الفقه وفضله Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

مقدمات حول أهمية الفقه وفضله dfasdf الفقه مسؤولية مهمة الأنبياء : « قل تعالوا اتلو ما حرم ربكم عليكم» ميراث النبوة. حراسة الدين من التحرييف والتزييف. توقيع عن رب العالمين. مقدمات حول أهمية الفقه وفضله Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

العلم بالأحكام الشرعية العملية المكتسبة من أدلتها التفصيلية dfasdf مفهوم الفقه ومجالاته الفقه لغة : دقة الفهم الفقه أصطلاحا: العلم بالأحكام الشرعية العملية المكتسبة من أدلتها التفصيلية مفهوم الفقه ومجالاته Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

العبادات المعاملات المناكحات الأقضية والمخاصمات الفقه مجالاته dfasdf الفقه مجالاته العبادات المعاملات المناكحات الأقضية والمخاصمات مفهوم الفقه ومجالاته Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

dfasdf مجالات الفقه كتاب الطهارة (المياه، النجاسات، الوضوء، الغسل، التيمم، الحيض، النفاس...) كتاب الصلاة (الأذان، المواقيت، أحكام الصلاة، صلاة التطوع والجماعة، والصلوات المخصوصة، والسجود، الجنائز) كتاب الصيام (أحكام الصيام، الاعتكاف) كتاب الزكاة(أحكامها، ما تجب فيه وله، الصدقات) كتاب الحج( الحج، العمرة، الهدي والكفارات، الأضحية، العقيقة) كتاب الجهاد( الجهاد، احكام الأسرى، الهدنة والعهد والذمة، الجزية) العبادات المعاملات المناكحات الأقضية والمخاصمات Animated open book effect[ (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

المعاملات البيوع والربا المعاوضات الشركات التوثيقات الأطعمة والأشربة dfasdf البيوع والربا المعاوضات الشركات التوثيقات الأطعمة والأشربة الصيد والذبائح العبادات المعاملات المناكحات الأقضية والمخاصمات Animated open book effect[ (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

المناكحات الزواج الطلاق العدد والإحداد الرضاع الحضانة النفقات dfasdf الزواج الطلاق العدد والإحداد الرضاع الحضانة النفقات الوصايا المواريث العبادات المعاملات المناكحات الأقضية والمخاصمات Animated open book effect[ (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

الجنايات الحدود القصاص التعازير الديات الأقضية والمخاصمات القضاء dfasdf الجنايات الحدود القصاص التعازير الديات القضاء الشهادات العبادات المعاملات المناكحات الأقضية والمخاصمات Animated open book effect[ (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

الفقه الحنفي الفقه الحنفي dfasdf Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

أئمة المذهب الإمام أبو حنيفة النعمان بن ثابت (80-150) dfasdf أئمة المذهب الإمام أبو حنيفة النعمان بن ثابت (80-150) تلاميذه المجتهدون في المذهب زفر بن هذيل 110-158 ابو يوسف يعقوب بن ابراهيم 113-182 محمد بن الحسن الشيباني 131-189 المجتهدون فيما لا رواية فيه احمد بن عمر الخصاف 261 أ بو جعفر الطحاوي 321 عبد الله بن حسين الكرخي 340 احمد القدوري 428 عبد العزيز الحلواني 448 محمد بن احمد السرخسي 483 الفقه الحنفي Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

كتب المذهب الحنفي (الأصول او ظاهر الرواية) dfasdf كتب المذهب الحنفي (الأصول او ظاهر الرواية) الكتب المروية عن الأئمة الثلاثة الجامع الصغير السير الصغير الجامع الكبير السير الكبير المبسوط «الأصل» الزيادات Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

كتب المذهب الحنفي (النوادر) dfasdf كتب المذهب الحنفي (النوادر) الكتب المروية عن الأئمة الثلاثة في غير كتب ظاهر الرواية الكيسانيات الهارونيات الجرجانيات الرقيات المجرد الامالي كتب النوادر Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

كتب المذهب الحنفي (الواقعات والفتاوى) dfasdf كتب المذهب الحنفي (الواقعات والفتاوى) مسائل استنبطها المتأخرون وليس فيها رواية نوازل السمرقندي فتاوى الحلواني الفتاوى الهندية الفتاوى النسفية فتاوى قاضيخان الفتاوى الظهيرية Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

المختصرات والشروح والحواشي dfasdf المختصرات والشروح والحواشي الوقاية (تاج الشريعة) المختار القدوري بداية المبتدي المبسوط الاختيار بدائع الصنائع الهداية حاشية ابن عابدين المختصرات Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left). الشروح الحواشي

نموذج مقترح لدراسة الفقه الحنفي dfasdf نموذج مقترح لدراسة الفقه الحنفي مختصر القدوري او بيداية المبتدي أو تنوير التمرتاشي التحفة وشرحها البدائع الهداية وشرحها فتح القدير الدرالمختار للحصكفي مبسوط السرخسي رد المحتار او حاشية ابن عابدين اللباب في الجمع بين السنة والكتاب للخزرجي مع نصب الراية مجلة الاحكام العدلية القواعد الفقهية Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

نماذج مختارة من الفقه الحنفي dfasdf نماذج مختارة من الفقه الحنفي Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

نماذج مختارة من الفقه الحنفي dfasdf نماذج مختارة من الفقه الحنفي Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

نماذج مختارة من الفقه الحنفي dfasdf نماذج مختارة من الفقه الحنفي Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

نماذج مختارة من الفقه الحنفي dfasdf نماذج مختارة من الفقه الحنفي Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

مصطلحات الاسماء في المذهب الحنفي dfasdf مصطلحات الاسماء في المذهب الحنفي الائمة الثلاثة ، أصحابنا، السلف، علماؤنا 1. أبو حنيفة: الامام، الامام الاعظم، صاحب المذهب، عنده الصاحبين ، الآخرين، عندهما 2. أبو يوسف: الامام الثاني، الثاني 3. محمد بن الحسن: الامام الرباني، الثالث الشيخان : ابو حنيفة وابو يوسف، الطرفين : ابو حنيفة ومحمد 4. الحسن بن زياد: الحسن الخلف: من محمد بن الحسن189 الى شمس الائمة الحلواني 450 شيخ الاسلام: على بن محمد الاسبيجابي الكمال بن الهمام: الكمال ، المحقق Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

مصطلحات اسماء الكتب في المذهب الحنفي dfasdf مصطلحات اسماء الكتب في المذهب الحنفي الأصل المبسوط لمحمد بن الحسن الكتاب مختصر القدوري المتون الاربعة القدوري، الوقاية المحبوبي، الكنز، المختار Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

مصطلحات الحروف في المذهب الحنفي dfasdf مصطلحات الحروف في المذهب الحنفي الحرف الدلالة الكتاب ح الامام ابو حنيفة النسفي في الوافي والكنز ط الطهطاوي في حاشيته على الدر ابن عابدين ابراهيم الحلبي في تحفة الاخيار على الدر ابن عابدين في الحاشية ز الامام زفر بن هذيل النسفي م الامام محمد الموصلي س الامام ابي يوسف النسفي والموصلي ف الامام الشافعي الموصلي والنسفي سم الصاحبان ابو يوسف ومحمد ك الامام مالك Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

الفقه المـــالكي الفقه المالكي dfasdf Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

أئمة المذهب الإمام مالك بن أنس (93-179) تلاميذه المجتهدون في المذهب dfasdf أئمة المذهب الإمام مالك بن أنس (93-179) تلاميذه المجتهدون في المذهب عبد الرحمن بن القاسم 132-191 عبد الملك بن الماجشون - 212 عبد الله بن عبد الحكم 150-214 أعلام المذهب وعلماؤه أصبغ بن الفرج 150-225 يحيى بن يحيى الاندلسي 152-234 عبد الملك بن حبيب 174-238 عبد السلام بن سحنون 160-240 محمد بن ابراهيم المواز 180-269 عبد الله بن ابي زيد القيرواني 310-386 الشيخ خليل بن اسحاق – 776 الحطاب، الدردير ، الدسوقي، عليش الفقه المالكي Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

الإمام عبد السلام التنوخي الملقب بسحنون -240هـ. أسئلة وأجوبة6200 * الإمام عبد السلام التنوخي الملقب بسحنون -240هـ *أسئلة وأجوبة6200 *تجمع اراء الامام *مالك مخرجة على اصوله *معتمدة عند كافة المالكية Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left). كتب المذهب المالكي

كتب المذهب المالكي الإمام شهاب الدين بن ادريس الملقب القرافي -684هـ جمع في الكتب الخمسة في المذهب ( المدونة والجواهر والتلقين والتفريع والرسالة) تجمع اراء الامام مالك مخرجة على اصوله من الكتب المشهورة عند المالكية Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left). كتب المذهب المالكي

كتب المذهب المالكي الشيخ خليل بن اسحاق -776هـ الشيخ خليل بن اسحاق -776هـ جمع فروع المذهب باختصار وضبط وتحرير خال عن الخلاف والدليل من أشهر المختصرات عند المالكية له اكثر من ستين شرحا Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left). كتب المذهب المالكي

أشهر الشروح والحواشي على مختصر خليل Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left). أشهر الشروح والحواشي على مختصر خليل كتب المذهب المالكي

كتب المذهب المالكي الشيخ أحمد بن يحيى الونشريسي -914هـ جمع فروع المذهب وفتاوى علماء الامصار والأجوبة للمتقدمين والمتأخرين يقع في قرابة 4500 صفحة اختصره المجلوي Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left). كتب المذهب المالكي

نموذج مقترح لدراسة الفقه المالكي dfasdf نموذج مقترح لدراسة الفقه المالكي مختصر ابن ابي زيد مختصر خليل شروح مختصر خليل شروح رسالة ابي زيد القيرواني المدونة الذخيرة فتح العلي المالك لعليش المعيار المعرب المعونة في فقه إمام المدينة للقاضي عبد الوهاب القوانين الفقهية لابن جزي البهجة في شرح التحفة للتسولي Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

نماذج مختارة من الفقه المالكي dfasdf نماذج مختارة من الفقه المالكي Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

نماذج مختارة من الفقه المالكي dfasdf نماذج مختارة من الفقه المالكي Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

نماذج مختارة من الفقه المالكي dfasdf نماذج مختارة من الفقه المالكي Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

نماذج مختارة من الفقه المالكي dfasdf نماذج مختارة من الفقه المالكي Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

نماذج مختارة من الفقه المالكي dfasdf نماذج مختارة من الفقه المالكي Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

مصطلحات في المذهب المالكي dfasdf مصطلحات في المذهب المالكي المصطلح الدلالة المدونة رواية سحنون عن ابن القاسم عن مالك الموازية كتاب محمد بن المواز العتبية كتاب للعتبي الواضحة كتاب لابن حبيب المختلطة لابن القاسم المبسوطة للقاضي اسماعيل المجموعة لابن عبدوس المدنيون ابن كنانه وابن الماجشون ومطرف وابن نافع وابن مسلمة وغيرهم Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

مصطلحات في المذهب المالكي dfasdf مصطلحات في المذهب المالكي المصريون كابن القاسم واشهب واصبغ وابن وهب المغاربة كالقيرواني واللخمي وابن رشد العراقيون عبد الوهاب وابن القصار والابهري وابن الجلاب الأخوان ابن الماجشون ومطرف الشيخان ابن ابي زيد والقابسي القرينان أشهب وابن نافع المحمدان ابن سحنون وابن المواز القاضيان اسماعيل وعبد الوهاب الفقهاء السبعة ابن المسيب وعروة بن الزبير والقاسم بن محمد بن ابي بكر وخارجة بن زيد بن ثابت وعبد الله بن عبد الله وسليمان بن يسار و سالم بن عبد الله Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

الفقه الشافعي الفقه المالكي dfasdf Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

إمام المذهب الفقه الشافعي الإمام محمد بن ادريس الشافعي (150-204) dfasdf إمام المذهب الإمام محمد بن ادريس الشافعي (150-204) المذهب القديم وهو فتواه آراؤه التي كان يقول بها في الحجاز وبغداد، ويلحق بها ما كان في طريقه إلى مصر . ويتسم المذهب القديم بمشابه مذهب مالك رحمه الله المذهب الجديد وهو فتواه وآراؤه بعد دخوله مصر. الفقه الشافعي Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

تلاميذ الإمام الفقه الشافعي رواة المذهب القديم رواة المذهب الجديد dfasdf تلاميذ الإمام رواة المذهب القديم إبراهيم بن خالد أبو ثور240 الحسين بن علي الكرابيسي248 الحسن بن محمد الزعفراني 260 رواة المذهب الجديد يوسف بن يحيى البويطي231 اسماعيل بن يحيى المزني 264 الربيع بن سليمان المرادي 270 الربيع بن سليمان الجيزي 256 حرملة بن يحيى 243 الفقه الشافعي Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

أي المذهبين يعد رأيا للشافعي dfasdf أي المذهبين يعد رأيا للشافعي أختلف علماء المذهب الجديد مطلقا ، ينسب للشافعي : قوله « لا يحلق عد القديم من المذهب»، « لا اجعل في حل من رواه عني» قول المارودي : الجديد عدا مسائل في كتاب الصداق الجديد عدا سبعة مسائل بعض المتأخرين الراجح أن مذهب الشافعي أن المذهب الجديد هو المعتمد ولكن تعتمد مسائل القديم إذا وافقت نصا شرعيا ولم يكن كذلك الجديد إذا لم يكن له في الجديد قول اذا اقر القول او لم يخالفه او بنى عليه قال النووي في المجموع: « أطلقوا القديم على مرجوع عنه ولا عمل عليه لكون غالبه كذلك» الفقه الشافعي Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

الاعتماد في مذهب الشافعي رحمه الله الأنماطي ابن سريج القفال الشاشي الربيع المرادي المزني طريقة العراقيين الماوردي الطبري الرازي المحاملي اثبت واتقن في نقل القواعد والنصوص والوجوه طريقة الخرسانين الجويني القاضي حسين المعودي القوراني أحسن تفريعا وترتيبا الجمع بين الطريقتين الردياني عراقي الجويني خرساني الشاشي عراقي الغزالي خرساني أول مراحل الاعتماد في المذهب

أشهر الشروح والحواشي على مختصر خليل Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left). أشهر الشروح والحواشي على مختصر خليل كتب المذهب المالكي

الاعتماد في مذهب الشافعي رحمه الله الشيخان الرافعي عبد الكريم بن محمد 624 المحرر (من وجيز الغزالي) شروح الوجيز الشرح الكبير والشرح الصغير النووي يحيى بن شرف 676 وهو المقدم عند الانفراد منهاج الطالبين مختصر محرر الرافعي المرحلة الثانية من الاعتماد

أشهر الشروح والحواشي على مختصر خليل Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left). أشهر الشروح والحواشي على مختصر خليل كتب المذهب المالكي

الاعتماد في مذهب الشافعي رحمه الله المحققان الجمال الرملي محمد بن احمد 1004مقدم عند المصريين تحفة المحتاج ابن حجر الهيتمي أحمد بن محمد 973 مقدم للجميع نهاية المحتاج المرحلة الثالثة الاستقرار المذهبي واعتماد المتأخرين

أشهر الشروح والحواشي على مختصر خليل Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left). أشهر الشروح والحواشي على مختصر خليل كتب المذهب المالكي

نموذج مقترح لدراسة الفقه المالكي dfasdf نموذج مقترح لدراسة الفقه المالكي مختصر المنهاج تحفة المحتاج شرح المنهاج لابن حجر نهاية المحتاج شرح المنهاج للرملي المدونة الذخيرة فتح العلي المالك لعليش المعيار المعرب المعونة في فقه إمام المدينة للقاضي عبد الوهاب القوانين الفقهية لابن جزي البهجة في شرح التحفة للتسولي Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

نماذج مختارة من الفقه الشافعي dfasdf نماذج مختارة من الفقه الشافعي Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

نماذج مختارة من الفقه الشافعي dfasdf نماذج مختارة من الفقه الشافعي Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).

واجعلنا من عبادك الصالحين العالمين العاملين اللهم فقهنا في الدين وعلمنا التأويل واجعلنا من عبادك الصالحين العالمين العاملين Animated open book effect (Difficult) Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle. Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”. On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows: Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). Select the second stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following: Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click Warm Matte (second option from the left). Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click Three Point (first row, first option from the left). On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle. To reproduce the second shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 180°. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%. In the Transparency box, enter 100%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under No Bevel, click None. To reproduce the third shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Select the third, duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”. Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 135°. Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the rest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following: Select the third, smaller rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following: Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover.   To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline. On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”. In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”. Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until five stops appear in the slider. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). In the Position box, enter 5%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select the third stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 18%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left). Select the fourth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 38%. Select the fifth stop in the slider, and then do the following: In the Position box, enter 93%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Color,s click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Right (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following: In the Transparency box, enter 60%. In the Size box, enter 100%. In the Blur box, enter 4 pt. In the Distance box, enter 3 pt. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide. Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility task pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following: In the Font list, select Vivaldi. In the Font Size list, select 18. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box. On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line. Select the line. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors, click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow to the right of Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines). Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group. In the Selection and Visibility task pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring Forward. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, point to Exit, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, do the following: In the Start list, select With Previous. In the Duration box, enter 1.00 second. Also on the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click From Right. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, lick Add Animation, point to Entrance, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe. In the Start list, select After Previous. In the Duration box, select 1.00 seconds. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). In the Position box, enter 63%. Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors, click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).